Kx tde100 руководство по программированию

• Page 1
  Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 2.0100 or later KX-TDE600: PGMPR Software File Version 2.0000 or later…

• Page 2: Safety Notices

  Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the Maintenance Console software. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

• Page 3
  Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre. CAUTION Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the PBX.
• Page 4
  Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC. Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting: http://www.doc.panasonic.de…

• Page 5: Table Of Contents

  Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ………………..11 Introduction ……………………12 1.1.1 Introduction ……………………12 1.1.2 Entering Characters …………………..13 PC Programming ………………….17 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console …………17 1.2.2 Password Security ………………….21 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console ……….23 Introduction ……………………24 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes ………….24 2.1.2…

• Page 6
  Table of Contents 2.6.8 Utility—Error Log ………………….77 2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor …………….79 2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace ………………..80 2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace …………….81 2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace ……………..82 2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report ………………83 2.6.14 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information …………..84 2.6.15 Utility—CS Information ………………..85 2.6.16…
• Page 7
  Table of Contents 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting ………337 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 ……….345 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 ……….351 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port …………….359 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port—Connection Command ……..369 3.43…
• Page 8
  Table of Contents [3-3] Call Pickup Group ………………..583 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting …………….585 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group ………………….586 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting ………………588 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager …………….589 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings ……..591 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List …..607 5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table ……609…
• Page 9
  13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting ………………928 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager ………………..930 14 Appendix ………………..933 14.1 Revision History ………………….934 14.1.1 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx ………934 14.1.2 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx ………935 14.2 Feature Programming References …………….936 PC Programming Manual…
• Page 10
  Table of Contents PC Programming Manual…

• Page 11: Overview

  Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual…

• Page 12: Introduction

  1.1.1 Introduction 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements.

• Page 13: Entering Characters

  1.1.2 Entering Characters 1.1.2 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Table 1 (Standard) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 14
  1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 2 (For CE model) PC Programming Manual…
• Page 15
  1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 3 (For RU model) PC Programming Manual…
• Page 16
  1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 4 (For GR model) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 17: Pc Programming

  1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance Console. This section describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console. System Requirements Required Operating System •…

• Page 18: Installing The Maintenance Console

  When necessary, this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes. • LAN settings. The DHCP Client function, IP addresses of the IPCMPR (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) and DSP cards, subnet mask address, and default gateway address can be assigned.

• Page 19
  Click OK to replace the country/area data of the PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to complete. Follow the procedure described in Section 3.16.1 Starting the PBX (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or Section 3.18.1 Starting the PBX (for KX-TDE600) in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX.
• Page 20
  1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console The IP telephones will not operate properly if these IP addresses are changed. • A DHCP server must be able to use a «client identifier» option specified by RFC 2131. • The PBX will not start properly if the IP addresses cannot be assigned automatically by the DHCP server when DHCP Client is set to Enable.

• Page 21: Password Security

  1.2.2 Password Security 1.2.2 Password Security To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform. The following types of system passwords are available: Password Description…

• Page 22
  1.2.2 Password Security PC Programming Manual…

• Page 23: Introduction Of Maintenance Console

  Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual…

• Page 24: Introduction

  2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialogue box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the 2 available software modes. • Batch mode Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored on your PC, without being connected to the PBX.

• Page 25
  2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Connection Settings for RS-232C Setting Values Explanation Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC’s RS-232C interface. Only available COM ports are displayed. Baud Rate (bps) 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, Specify the speed of data 57600, 115200 transmission.
• Page 26
  2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Setting Values Explanation Port Number 1–65535 Specify the port number used to access the PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that was input in Maintenance Port Number of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR.

• Page 27: Access Levels

  2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed format for each programmer code is as follows: Item Length User Level Programmer Code…

• Page 28
  2.1.2 Access Levels File Menu Option Batch Interactive Close ü ü ü Save ü ü ü Save As ü ü ü Exit ü ü ü ü ü ü Disconnect Menu Option Batch Interactive Disconnect ü ü ü Tool Menu Option Batch Interactive SD memory backup…
• Page 29
  2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Batch Interactive ü ü Import®V-IPGW16 GW Settings Import®V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü Export®Feature — Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü Export®Incoming Call — DDI/DID Table ü ü Export®ARS — Leading Digit ü…
• Page 30
  2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Batch Interactive Digital Trunk Error Report ü IP Extension Statistical Information ü CS Information ü PS Information ü Ping ü Timed Update ü System Reset®Reset by the Command ü Flash ROM ID Information ü View Menu Option Batch Interactive…

• Page 31: Software Interface

  2.1.3 Software Interface 2.1.3 Software Interface This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface. Main Window The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below: Menu Bar Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX.

• Page 32
  2.1.3 Software Interface • File Contains the icon for saving files. For details, see Section 2.3.2 File—Save. • Tools Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup and 2.5.8 Tool —Extension List View.
• Page 33
  2.1.3 Software Interface Area Values Description PBX System Data Versionxxx-xxx Displays the version number of the system Version software installed to the PBX. The first 3 digits are the version number, and the last 3 digits are the revision number. PBX Region Code Regionxxx-xxx Displays the region code assigned to the PBX and…

• Page 34: Card Status

  2.1.4 Card Status 2.1.4 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes).

• Page 35: Display Options

  2.1.5 Display Options 2.1.5 Display Options The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console. • View – Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons. – Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window. –…

• Page 36: Extension Number Setting

  2.1.6 Extension Number Setting 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.

• Page 37: Start Menu

  2.2.1 Start Menu—New 2.2 Start Menu 2.2.1 Start Menu—New Creates a new system data file, used to programme the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their initial or default state. This option is only available at Installer level. To upload the file created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

• Page 38: Start Menu-Open

  2.2.2 Start Menu—Open 2.2.2 Start Menu—Open Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode. When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended.

• Page 39: Start Menu-Connect-Rs-232C

  2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C 2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

• Page 40: Start Menu-Connect-Usb

  2.2.4 Start Menu—Connect—USB 2.2.4 Start Menu—Connect—USB Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through a USB port (USB Module) attached to the KX-DT300 series or KX-T7600 series DPT. To connect to the PBX by USB From the start menu, select Connect. The Login window will be displayed.

• Page 41: Start Menu-Connect-Lan

  2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN 2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the Local Area Network interface of the PBX. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

• Page 42: Start Menu-Connect-Modem

  2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem 2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem. To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 13.1 [11-1] Main. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

• Page 43: Start Menu-Connect-Isdn Remote

  2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—ISDN Remote 2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—ISDN Remote Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode using the ISDN TA interface of the PBX. This method is only available when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI 2.0 is used, and Remote —ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number of the 13.1 [11-1] Main screen is set.

• Page 44: Start Menu-Connect-Profile Setup

  2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup 2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting the connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection settings for several PBXs.

• Page 45: File

  2.3.1 File—Close 2.3 File 2.3.1 File—Close Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the start menu. To close a system data file • From the File menu, select Close. If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.

• Page 46: File-Save

  2.3.2 File—Save 2.3.2 File—Save Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

• Page 47: File-Save As

  2.3.3 File—Save As 2.3.3 File—Save As Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

• Page 48: File-Exit

  2.3.4 File—Exit 2.3.4 File—Exit Closes the Maintenance Console. To exit the Maintenance Console • From the File menu, select Exit If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file. •…

• Page 49: Disconnect

  2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect 2.4 Disconnect 2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup). To disconnect From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.

• Page 50: Tool

  2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup 2.5 Tool 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen. To back up system data • From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup. PC Programming Manual…

• Page 51: Tool-Bri Automatic Configuration

  2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration 2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card. This option is only available at Installer level. This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and Mode, on the Network tab of the 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port screen.

• Page 52: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear

  2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.

• Page 53: Tool-Dxdp All Ous

  2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS 2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to «OUS» simultaneously. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS. From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS. Click OK. PC Programming Manual…

• Page 54: Tool-Simplified Voice Message-Delete All Recording

  2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording 2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording Deletes all voice messages recorded by the built-in SVM feature. To delete voice messages From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording. Select the card from which to delete messages.

• Page 55: Tool-Simplified Voice Message-Check Current Usage

  2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage 2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage Displays information on the voice messages stored by the built-in SVM feature. For each message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed. To view SVM message status •…

• Page 56: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group

  2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing » 0″. To activate this tool •…

• Page 57: Tool-Extension List View

  2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View 2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature. The types that can be displayed are as follows: Type Detail…

• Page 58: Tool-Import

  2.5.9 Tool—Import 2.5.9 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 2.5.10 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.

• Page 59
  2.5.9 Tool—Import ARS — Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number ARS — Except Code Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Exception…
• Page 60
  2.5.9 Tool—Import Quick Dial (Basic) Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dial (Expansion) Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial SIP Extension Data Type Import Destination…
• Page 61
  2.5.9 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination Packet Sampling Time (G. Packet Sampling Time (G. 711Mu) 711Mu) Packet Sampling Time (G. Packet Sampling Time (G. 729A) 729A) Voice Activity Detection for G. Voice Activity Detection for G. FAX Detection Ability FAX Detection Ability DTMF DTMF Payload Type…

• Page 62: Tool-Export

  2.5.10 Tool—Export 2.5.10 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 2.5.9 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS — Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.

• Page 63: Tool-Screen Customize-User Level/Administrator Level

  2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level 2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and Administrator levels. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited.

• Page 64: Utility

  DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, ECSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID, IP-EXT Card CT Bus diagnosis (KX-TDE100/ DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, CSLC16, CSIF, LCOT, T1, E1, KX-TDE200 only) BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID, IP-EXT…

• Page 65
  2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis To perform a card test From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to «OUS». Click on the cell showing the card type. A new window will be displayed. Select the Card Test option.
• Page 66
  2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis From the CO Line Port No. drop-down list, select the port number of the trunk you want to test. Click Test. The error report will be displayed. Select an option: • Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.

• Page 67: Utility-File Transfer Pc To Pbx (Sd Card)

  Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message. The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows: Main Programme KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card…

• Page 68
  High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PCS24G CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station PDCS24G CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station System Data KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DMSYS IPCMPR PC Programming Manual…
• Page 69
  Corresponding Unit DLNG0–DLNG5 DVMLNG1–DVMLNG5 VPS (Display Guidance data) Activation Key Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card LIC00–LIC99 V-IPEXT32, V-SIPEXT32, V-IPGW16, V-SIPGW16 Default Value Data KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DMINI IPCMPR DMIDHLC DHLC8 DMISLC SLC8/CSLC16 DMIDLC…
• Page 70
  2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DMIEIO DMIIPGW2 IP-GW4 DMIIPGW3 IP-GW16 DMIPRI23 PRI23 DMIPRI30 PRI30 DMISLCLC SLC16 DMIDID DID8 DMIIPEXT IP-EXT16 DMIVIPGW V-IPGW16 DMIVSPGW V-SIPGW16 DMIVIPEX V-IPEXT32 DMIVSPEX V-SIPEX32 KX-TDE600 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DGINI IPCEMPR…
• Page 71
  2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DGIVIPGW V-IPGW16 DGIVSPGW V-SIPGW16 DGIVIPEX V-IPEXT32 DGIVSPEX V-SIPEX32 To transfer files to the SD memory card From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card). The dialogue box will be displayed.

• Page 72: Utility-File Transfer Pbx (Sd Card) To Pc

  Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level. The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows: File Name File Type DMSYS (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) System Data DGSYS (KX-TDE600) $SYSERR Error Data $SYSERR1–$SYSERR9…

• Page 73: Utility-Sd Card File View And Load

  2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programmes stored in LPR cards (cards with local processors) and Cell Stations (CSs). This option is only available at Installer level.

• Page 74: Utility-Sd Card File Delete

  Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card. This option is only available at Installer level. The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility: KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR, DMSYS KX-TDE600: PGMPR, DGSYS To delete files from the SD memory card From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.

• Page 75: Utility-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx

  2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX 2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the selected MSG/ESVM card. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. The OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status.

• Page 76: Utility-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc

  2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC 2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the MSG/ESVM card to the PC. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. The OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status.

• Page 77: Utility-Error Log

  2.6.8 Utility—Error Log 2.6.8 Utility—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows: Button Function…

• Page 78
  4: Expansion Shelf 3 • YY: Slot number – KX-TDE100 (Physical slot): 00 to 06 (00: IPCMPR Card Slot; 01 to 06: Free Slots) – KX-TDE200 (Physical slot): 00 to 11 (00: IPCMPR Card Slot; 01 to 11: Free Slots) –…

• Page 79: Utility-T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

  2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor 2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of the T1 or E1 card, by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

• Page 80: Utility-T1/E1 Line Trace

  2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace 2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 or E1 line. This utility is intended for use by dealers. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status. To view trace data From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Line Trace.

• Page 81: Utility-Isdn/Qsig Protocol Trace

  2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace 2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI, PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target BRI, PRI or IP-GW card be set to INS status.

• Page 82: Utility-V-Ipgw16 Protocol Trace

  2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace 2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be set to INS status. To save trace data to the SD Memory Card From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.

• Page 83: Utility-Digital Trunk Error Report

  2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report 2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.

• Page 84: Utility-Ip Extension Statistical Information

  2.6.14 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information 2.6.14 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on IP extensions, IP-EXT cards, V-IPEXT32 cards, and the DSP card. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset. Port No.

• Page 85: Utility-Cs Information

  2.6.15 Utility—CS Information 2.6.15 Utility—CS Information Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target CSIF, DHLC or DLC card be set to INS status. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description…

• Page 86: Utility-Ps Information

  2.6.16 Utility—PS Information 2.6.16 Utility—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available at Installer level. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No. PS location number. Only registered PSs will be displayed. Extension Number Extension number of the PS.

• Page 87: Utility-Ping

  2.6.17 Utility—Ping 2.6.17 Utility—Ping Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time. This option is only available when the Maintenance Console is in Interactive mode. To perform a Ping test Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.

• Page 88: Utility-Timed Update

  2.6.18 Utility—Timed Update 2.6.18 Utility—Timed Update Updates programmes in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards. This option is only available at Installer level.

• Page 89: Utility-System Reset-Reset By The Command

  PBX. This option is only available at Installer level. Two copies of each of the main system files can be stored on the SD memory card. The names of these files are as follows: KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 File Name Description DMSYS Main system data file.

• Page 90
  2.6.19 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command • Click Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files. Click OK to reset the PBX, or Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files. If the reset command was not carried out correctly, an error message will be displayed, and you will be returned to the main screen.

• Page 91: Utility-Flash Rom Id Information

  2.6.20 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information 2.6.20 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information Displays the Flash ROM ID number pre-assigned to the PBX, used for PBX installation management. This option is only available in some countries/areas. To view the Flash ROM ID • From the Utility menu, click Flash ROM ID Information.

• Page 92: Help

  KX-T7600 series DPT with a USB Module? • Is the USB driver on the PC running? To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for «Panasonic KX-TDA USB Main Unit driver» in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB driver •…

• Page 93
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem. • Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main. • Has a modem been installed to the PBX? •…
• Page 94
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • This cannot be done, since the IP-GW4 card requires both channels of a port to be set to «OUS»/»INS» together. I cannot change an LCO port to INS status. • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot? •…
• Page 95
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old FCO. • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location. If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
• Page 96
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any extensions (see 2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View). If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings).
• Page 97
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) I cannot change a feature number. • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: •…
• Page 98
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
• Page 99
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Setting Features How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk? • From the 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to «DTMF» or «Pulse», as required. How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk? •…
• Page 100
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Headset OFF/ON on the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port screen to «Headset ON». What programming do I have to perform to use XDP with an extension port? • XDP Mode on the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port screen to «On».
• Page 101
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group? • Perform the following steps: On the 5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table. On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.
• Page 102
  2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 103: [1] Configuration

  Section 3 [1] Configuration PC Programming Manual…

• Page 104: 1-1] Slot

  3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.1 [1-1] Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 3.2 [1-1] Slot —Summary).

• Page 105
  DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Lamp Card Extension Type KX-TDE100: 6 SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone KX-TDE200: 8 Extension Card SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card…
• Page 106
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual Gateway Card KX-TDE200: 2 IP Gateway For more information on the IPCMPR card, virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 Installation Manual: → 1.3.1 Optional Equipment → 3.3.1 IPCMPR Card →…
• Page 107
  3.1 [1-1] Slot Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Type Extension Card ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone…
• Page 108
  3.1 [1-1] Slot Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming EECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller None Card V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Card Virtual IP Extension V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Card Virtual SIP Extension V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual Gateway Card…

• Page 109: 1-1] Slot-Summary

  Indicates the type of service card installed in each slot of the physical shelf (reference only). Note that for IPCMPR/IPCEMPR cards, the PBX model code is displayed in parentheses after the name. Value Range Card Type for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card…

• Page 110
  3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card IP-EXT16: 16-Channel VoIP Extension Card IPCMPR: IPCMPR Card Card Type for KX-TDE600: DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card…
• Page 111
  3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Status Indicates the card status (reference only) Note that IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card status is always displayed as «-«. Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
• Page 112
  3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Slot Type Indicates the slot type (reference only). Value Range Trunk, Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References…
• Page 113
  3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None Status Indicates the card status (reference only). Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

• Page 114: 1-1] Slot-Activation Key

  IP-PTs to be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. The remainder is the number of IP softphones that can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. IPCMPR-ID (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR-ID (for KX-TDE600) Indicates the ID number of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card (reference only).

• Page 115
  3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key Feature Guide References None Number of Activation Key provided by—VoIP-DSP Card Indicates the number of channels provided by the DSP card (reference only). Value Range For DSP16 card: IP Trunk (ch): 4 IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): 8 For DSP64 card: IP Trunk (ch): 16 IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): 32…
• Page 116
  3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key Value Range 0–128 Maintenance Console Location 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual…

• Page 117: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Ipcmpr

  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR The properties of the IPCMPR card can be specified. For the KX-TDE600, this card is known as the IPCEMPR card. LAN Setting DHCP Client Enables the DHCP Client function to assign IP address information automatically to the IPCMPR card. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 118
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MAC Address for VoIP-DSP Indicates the MAC address of either the DSP16 or DSP64 card (reference only). Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–AA:AA:AA:AA:AA:AA Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 119: Subnet Mask

  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask address of the IPCMPR card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled. Value Range 0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255 (except 0.0.0.0 and 255.255.255.255) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None…

• Page 120
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Speed/Duplex for Maintenance Port Specifies the connection mode of the maintenance port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when Auto Negotiation fails.
• Page 121
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Feature Guide References None DHCP Port Number Specifies the port number used by a DHCP server. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment DHCP Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive IP addressing information from a DHCP server.
• Page 122
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Card Status Indicates whether the DSP card is enabled for use (reference only). Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References…
• Page 123
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR IP Extension Count of BGM Specifies how many IP-PTs connected to the IPCMPR card can send out BGM. Value Range When using the built-in SVM feature: 0–49 When not using the built-in SVM feature: 0–53 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR…
• Page 124
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 FAX Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for fax communications using G.711 CODEC. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None…
• Page 125
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for Voice Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 126
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for Voice Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for voice communications. Value Range 1000–65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None…
• Page 127
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for FAX Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for fax communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 128
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Detection Level for G.711µ Specifies the level of DTMF detection for the G.711µ CODEC. Value Range -39– -6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 129
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation. Value Range 1–3 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 130
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR LOGIN Port Number Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN. Value Range 0–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Port Number Specifies the port number used to operate CTI via the LAN.
• Page 131
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LINK for Maintenance Port Indicates the current connection status of the maintenance port (reference only). Value Range Disconnect, Connect Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 132
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IP Address for VoIP-DSP Indicates the IP address of either the DSP16 or DSP64 card (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 133
  3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Feature Guide References None Default Gateway Indicates the IP address of the default gateway for the network (reference only). Value Range 0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None…

• Page 134: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property

  3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property The properties of the built-in 2-channel SVM (Simplified Voice Message) feature can be specified. To change the status of the built-in 2-channel SVM feature, click Command. Only the following parameters are applicable for the built-in 2-channel SVM feature. Other parameters on this screen are only applicable for the Optional Base card.

• Page 135
  3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Value Range In sub-slot 1–2: Reserve: No feature is installed. In sub-slot 3: ESVM2: Built-in 2-channel SVM feature is installed. Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Indicates the status of the feature type of each slot (reference only).

• Page 136: Port Status

  3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Status Indicates the port status of the built-in SVM feature (reference only). Value Range For sub-slot 1–2: Not applicable.

• Page 137: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property-Card Command

  3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command 3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Commands for the built-in 2-channel SVM (Simplified Voice Message) feature can be programmed. Puts the feature in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 138: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Virtual Ip Gateway Port

  3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Gateway Port 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Gateway Port Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. To change the status of virtual IP Gateway ports, click Command. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).

• Page 139: Call Distribution Port Group

  3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Gateway Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Gateway Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 140: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Virtual Ip Gateway Port-Connection Command

  3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Gateway Port —Connection Command Commands for the virtual IP gateway ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References…

• Page 141: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property — Virtual Ip Gateway

  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to OUS.

• Page 142
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Primary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway…
• Page 143
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Secondary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the secondary gatekeeper.
• Page 144
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 145
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None H.323 Dynamic Port Number Specifies the starting port number from which 448 contiguous ports are used as dynamic ports. Value Range 1–65000 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 146
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway RTCP Packet Interval Specifies the length of time until the PBX retries to send RTCP packets when no reply is received. Value Range 5–60 s Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 147
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 148
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 149
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway…
• Page 150
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway QSIG-CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 151
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Outgoing Call En-bloc Dialling setting Selects the call dialling mode. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
• Page 152
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Overlap—Inter-digit Timer (T302-2) Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialled. Value Range 1–10 s Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 153
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Codec Priority 1st Specifies the highest priority CODEC type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G. 711µ for this parameter. Value Range G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 154
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Value Range None, G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time for G.711A Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
• Page 155
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time for G.729A Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 156
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
• Page 157
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway T.38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 158
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None T.38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 159
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message. Value Range 0–600 ´…
• Page 160
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 161
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None…
• Page 162
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´…
• Page 163
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 164
  3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual…

• Page 165: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property — Virtual Ip Gateway-Gk Settings

  3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway— GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Value Range Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings Programming Manual References…

• Page 166: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property — Virtual Ip Gateway-Gw Settings

  3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway— GW Settings The settings related to destination gateway devices can be programmed. The following parameters can be specified for a maximum of 512 destination gateway devices. Main GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.

• Page 167
  3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Value Range 1–256, None Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection for IP-GW16 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature between the V-IPGW and IP-GW16 cards. Value Range Disable (TDE), Enable (TDA) Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 168
  3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Feature Guide References None Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones are audible at the destination. Value Range External, Internal Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings…
• Page 169
  3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Value Range For 1st: G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A For 2nd and 3rd: None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
• Page 170
  3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 171
  3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 CODEC. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.
• Page 172
  3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).

• Page 173: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property — Virtual Ip Gateway-Dn2Ip

  3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway— DN2IP The related settings of the address translation of telephone numbers and IP addresses can be programmed. Leading Number Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which to associate calls with the appropriate destination. Value Range Max.

• Page 174
  3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP Maintenance Console Location 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. Value Range 1–256 Maintenance Console Location 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP Programming Manual References…

• Page 175: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property — Virtual Ip Gateway-Hunt Pattern

  3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property — Virtual IP Gateway— Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.

• Page 176: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Virtual Ip Extension

  The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.

• Page 177
  3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual IP Extension Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data.
• Page 178
  1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol). To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
• Page 179
  Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Resending Time Out (PTAP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol). To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
• Page 180
  3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual IP Extension Resending Time Out (MGCP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol). To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 75–120 s Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 181
  3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None…
• Page 182
  3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 183: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Virtual Ip Extension

  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP extension port. To change the status of virtual IP extension ports, click Command. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.

• Page 184
  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear. Click OK. A dialogue box will appear. Click Confirm. • If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show «Forced De-registration Succeed».

• Page 185: Extension Number

  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port. To change the extension number of an extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply. Set the status of the extension port to «OUS», then «INS». When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use.

• Page 186
  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 187
  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-PT (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 188
  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension…
• Page 189
  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 190
  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Value Range Headset OFF, Headset ON Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls. Value Range A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz) B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
• Page 191
  3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 192: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Virtual Ip Extension-Connection Command

  3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension —Connection Command Commands for the virtual IP extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual IP Extension…

• Page 193: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Virtual Sip Extension

  3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.

• Page 194
  3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP Location Hold Time Interval Specifies the interval time that the PBX waits before starting to hold information on location of SIP Extensions. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
• Page 195
  3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
• Page 196
  3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension…

• Page 197: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Virtual Sip Extension Port

  3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. To change the status of virtual SIP extension ports, click Command. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).

• Page 198
  3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect. Value Range Max.
• Page 199
  3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 200
  3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port Packet Sampling Time (G.711/G.722) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port…
• Page 201
  3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Voice Activity Detection for G.729A Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for G.729A CODEC. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network.

• Page 202: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Virtual Sip Extension Port-Connection Command

  3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command Commands for the virtual SIP extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Virtual SIP Extension Port…

• Page 203: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Extension Type

  3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type The property for the extension cards can be specified. KX-T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode Selects whether the control signals sent by the Transfer and Hold buttons on KX-T7250 PTs are reversed or not.

• Page 204
  3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Off Hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.
• Page 205
  3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 206: Slt Power Supply

  3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Timing — Range Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.

• Page 207: Optional Equipment

  SLC8 cards. Value Range None, Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type Installation Manual References For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 3.6.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) For KX-TDE600: 3.8.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 208
  3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone PC Programming Manual…

• Page 209: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Extension Port

  3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.

• Page 210
  3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Port Type Indicates the port type (reference only). Value Range DPT: DPT port (DLC) SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/CSLC) S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
• Page 211
  3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Programming Manual References 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port—Port Type View Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows: •…

• Page 212: Xdp Mode

  3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Programming Manual References 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 213: Parallel Telephone Ringing

  Value Range Normal: For connecting a DPT DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 [with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200] or 64 [with the KX-TDE600] DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)

• Page 214
  SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: Location number for DSS Console: 1–64 Location number for PC Console: 1–8…
• Page 215
  3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group DPT Type—VM Port No. Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to VM (DPT).
• Page 216
  3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid(SLT), or S-Hybrid(S-DPT). This setting is not available for the KX-T7200, the KX-T7451, APTs, or SLTs.

• Page 217: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Extension Port-Connection Command

  3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port—Connection Command 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port— Connection Command Commands for the extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 218: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Extension Port-Port Type View

  3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port—Port Type View 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode. Type Indicates the types of telephone (reference only). Value Range New-DPT (KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series DPTs), Old-DPT (DPTs other than KX-DT300 series/ KX-T7600 series), APT, SLT, DSS Console, VM, Other, CS, High-density CS, IP-EXT, IP-PT, SIP…

• Page 219: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Csi/F Port

  3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service). To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

• Page 220
  3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •…
• Page 221
  3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual…

• Page 222: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Csi/F Port-Connection Command

  3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port—Connection Command 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port— Connection Command Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed. Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — CSI/F Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 223: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Lco Type

  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 224
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal sent from the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.
• Page 225
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly. Value Range 64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References…
• Page 226
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
• Page 227
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Value Range Other, 60 %, 67 % Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Feature Guide References None High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial.
• Page 228
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Feature Guide References None Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 229
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Max Receive Time Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network. Value Range 0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References…
• Page 230
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Value Range Length + Timer, Timer Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—…
• Page 231
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range 80 ´…
• Page 232
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 233: Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency

  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Caller ID—Caller ID Header [03] Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal. Value Range DDN, Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID…

• Page 234
  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse — MIN Specifies the minimum length that a received pay tone signal must be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal.

• Page 235: Pay Tone—Sending Flash While End Talk

  3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 236: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Lco Port

  3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 237: Busy Out Status

  3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •…

• Page 238: Cpc Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming

  3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Feature Guide References 1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 239
  3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk. Value Range Low, High Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 240
  3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Caller ID Detection Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Programming Manual References 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID…
• Page 241
  3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Feature Guide References 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. Value Range None, 16 ´…

• Page 242: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Lco Port-Connection Command

  3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port—Connection Command 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port— Connection Command Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 243: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Bri Type/Pri Type

  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´…

• Page 244
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 ´…
• Page 245
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References…
• Page 246
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´…
• Page 247
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
• Page 248
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References…
• Page 249
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in «Permanent» mode. Value Range 0–3000 ´…
• Page 250
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T201 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´…
• Page 251
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 252
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References…
• Page 253
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T307 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting. Value Range 0–6000 ´…
• Page 254
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None…
• Page 255
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message. Value Range 0–3000 ´…
• Page 256
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 257
  3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual…

• Page 258: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Bri Port

  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Main Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 259
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• Page 260
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None LLC Information Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing call is made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech.

• Page 261: Isdn Co

  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call. Value Range Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network. Disconnect: Disconnect the call.

• Page 262
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 263
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •…
• Page 264
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Outgoing Call Type Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
• Page 265
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold supplementary service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link in some countries/areas.
• Page 266
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port ISDN Extension Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 267
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• Page 268
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension ISDN TE Power Enables the PBX to supply power to the ISDN TE (Terminal Equipment). This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 269
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension Network Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 270
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• Page 271
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Network Type…
• Page 272
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port. Value Range Call, Permanent Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 273
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 274
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• Page 275
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Trunk Property…
• Page 276
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Feature Guide References None Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks. Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 277
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Supplementary Service Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 278
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• Page 279
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
• Page 280
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 281
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
• Page 282
  3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port CCBS Type Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted. CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number. Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 283: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Bri Port-Connection Command

  3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—Connection Command 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port— Connection Command Commands for the BRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 284: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Pri Port

  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None…

• Page 285
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• Page 286
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network. Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
• Page 287
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Feature Guide References None CRC4 Mode Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking control technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is usually a 16- to 32-bit character.

• Page 288: Co Setting

  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Setting CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

• Page 289
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type.
• Page 290
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
• Page 291
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Outgoing Call Type Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
• Page 292
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 293
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 294
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the type of the port. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.

• Page 295: Network Configuration

  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Feature Guide References None Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00) Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with «0» or «00». Value Range Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN. Ring AN Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

• Page 296
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 297
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •…
• Page 298
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Network Numbering Plan Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
• Page 299
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• Page 300
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port. Value Range Public: Public network VPN: Virtual Private Network Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 301
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks. Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 302
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Feature Guide References None Supplementary Service Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot…
• Page 303
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
• Page 304
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
• Page 305
  3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) CCBS Delete Digits Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network.

• Page 306: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Pri Port-Connection Command

  3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port—Connection Command 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port—Connection Command Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 307: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — T1 Type

  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type The properties of the T1 card can be specified. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used. Value Range B8ZS, AMI Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References…

• Page 308
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Send Option Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU. Value Range Mode-1–Mode-8 Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References…
• Page 309
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type First Dial Timer (CO) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
• Page 310
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References…
• Page 311
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type DTMF Tone—DTMF Transmit Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted. Value Range 3-n (n=0–15) dB Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone—DTMF Receive Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be received.
• Page 312
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 313
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´…
• Page 314
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX) Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals from an SLT connected to an OPX. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 315
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE) Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 316
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Flash—Flash Width (TIE) Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References…
• Page 317
  3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — T1 type Programming Manual References…

• Page 318: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — T1 Port

  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 319
  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •…
• Page 320
  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CO Dial Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 321: Cpc Signal Detection (Lco/Gco)—Outgoing, Incoming

  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs. Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming…

• Page 322
  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 323
  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Value Range 64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
• Page 324
  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Feature Guide References None Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 325
  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 326
  3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Programming Manual References None…

• Page 327: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — T1 Port-Connection Command

  3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port—Connection Command 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port—Connection Command Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 328: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — E1 Type

  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type The properties of the E1 card can be specified. To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card.

• Page 329
  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX.
• Page 330
  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Seizure ACK Wait Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the seizure ACK signal. Value Range 0.5 ´ n (n=1–20) s Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 331
  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Feature Guide References None RAI Signal Detection Mode Selects the RAI signal detection mode. Value Range Type 1, Type 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None…
• Page 332
  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type…
• Page 333
  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 334
  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from an E1 line. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 335
  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Value Range 8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 336
  3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type Programming Manual References None…

• Page 337: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — E1 Type-Line Signal Setting

  3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting DR2 Setting Type Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal. Value Range Normal, Option-1, Option-3 Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None…

• Page 338
  3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bit Position for Clear Back Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal. Value Range A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 339
  3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Forced Release Pattern Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal. Value Range A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1 Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None…
• Page 340
  3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Feature Guide References None E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure Specifies the length of a seizure signal. Value Range 150 ms, 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 341
  3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK Specifies whether the PBX waits for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None…
• Page 342
  3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Value Range A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Meter Pulse Detection—Length Specifies the length that a call charge meter pulse must be for the PBX to recognise it as a call charge meter pulse.
• Page 343
  3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Receive Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a DTMF signal. Value Range -42 — 0 dB –…
• Page 344
  3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Error Detection—Error Detection Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 345: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — E1 Type-Mfc-R2 Setting 1

  3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 ANI Service—Mode Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode. Value Range None: ANI service is not activated. Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line. Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line.

• Page 346
  3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Maintenance Console Location 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC-R2 Timer—Backward Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward signal sent from the telephone company.
• Page 347
  3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Start Specifies the code used to indicate the beginning of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 348
  3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References…
• Page 349
  3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Incoming Call [1]–[15] Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group-ll code respectively. Value Range Undefined, Subscriber, Operator, Collect Call Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 350
  3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Feature Guide References None MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*]. Value Range 11–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 351: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — E1 Type-Mfc-R2 Setting 2

  3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None…

• Page 352
  3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1) Additional Code Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.
• Page 353
  3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—(N) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 354
  3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None…
• Page 355
  3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (2) Specifies the code used in special circumstances, such as an international call, to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle.
• Page 356
  3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-B Code Assignment—Busy Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is busy. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 357
  3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is out of service. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References…
• Page 358
  3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual…

• Page 359: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — E1 Port

  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 360
  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •…
• Page 361
  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Channel Type Selects the channel type. Value Range Undefined: Not assigned DR2: Digital System R2 E&M-P: Pulsed E & M E&M-C: Continuous E & M Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 362
  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Value Range DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2 Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection 1.22.1 E1 Line Service E1 Receiver Type Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line.

• Page 363: Cpc Detection Time—Out, In

  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CPC Detection Time—Out, In Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.

• Page 364
  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Value Range 10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time-Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
• Page 365
  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P or E&M-C. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References None…
• Page 366
  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 367
  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code…
• Page 368
  3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate PC Programming Manual…

• Page 369: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — E1 Port-Connection Command

  3.42 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port—Connection Command 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port—Connection Command Commands for the E1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 370: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Em Type

  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type The properties for the E & M card can be specified. Interface Selects E & M signal type. Value Range Continuous, Pulsed with Answer, Pulsed without Answer, Continuous No Answer Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References…

• Page 371
  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Inter-digit Timer Specifies the pseudo-answer time. Value Range 3–15 s Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 372
  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 60 %, 67 % Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References…
• Page 373
  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 374
  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 375
  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Width Specifies the maximum length of a hookswitch signal sent from an SLT that can be recognised by the PBX as a flash signal. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References…
• Page 376
  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear Selects the length of a clear pulse. Value Range 150 ms, 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References…
• Page 377
  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None…
• Page 378
  3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — EM type Programming Manual References None…

• Page 379: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Em Port

  3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Various settings can be programmed for each E & M channel. To change the status of channels, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 380
  3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •…
• Page 381
  3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the E & M line. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 382
  3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E & M line. Value Range 10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 383
  3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received. Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 384
  3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 385
  3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 386
  3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Programming Manual References None…

• Page 387: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Em Port-Connection Command

  3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port—Connection Command 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port—Connection Command Commands for the E & M channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 388: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Did Type

  3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type The property for the DID card can be specified. First Dial Timer Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX.

• Page 389
  3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type…
• Page 390
  3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 391
  3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting—Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 392
  3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 393: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Did Port

  3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Various settings can be programmed for each DID port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 394
  3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •…
• Page 395
  3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the DID line. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 396: Cpc Detection Time—Out (Did), In (Did)

  3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.

• Page 397
  3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Sending Caller ID to CO Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent to an analogue trunk. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None…
• Page 398
  3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Programming Manual References…
• Page 399
  3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 400: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Did Port-Connection Command

  3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port—Connection Command 3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port— Connection Command Commands for the DID ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — DID Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 401: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Ip Gateway

  3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Gateway 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Gateway The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified. En-bloc Dialling setting Selects the call dialling mode. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.

• Page 402
  3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Gateway Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG PC Programming Manual…

• Page 403: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Ip-Gw Port

  3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-GW Port 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-GW Port Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

• Page 404
  3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-GW Port Maintenance Console Location 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-GW Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •…

• Page 405: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Ip-Gw Port-Connection Command

  3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-GW Port—Connection Command 3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-GW Port— Connection Command Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-GW Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-GW Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 406: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Ip Extension

  3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified. To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings (see 3.53 [1-1] Slot— Card Property — IP Extension—Common Settings).

• Page 407
  3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension Programming Manual References 3.53 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension—Common Settings Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Keep Alive Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no transmissions from that IP-PT.
• Page 408
  3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 409
  3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Selects whether the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) is used to control echo sound quality. Value Range Use Non-Linear Processor, Use Fixed TX Gain Maintenance Console Location 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension Programming Manual References…

• Page 410: 1-1] Slot-Card Property — Ip Extension-Common Settings

  3.53 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension—Common Settings 3.53 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension— Common Settings IP-PT network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS. Gateway Address Specifies the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs.

• Page 411
  3.53 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension—Common Settings For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here. Value Range 1024–65472 Maintenance Console Location 3.53 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension—Common Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

• Page 412: 1-1] Slot-Port Property — Ip-Extension Port

  3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port 3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used. Programming instructions for the PBX are given below.

• Page 413
  3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Click Forced De-registration. A dialogue box will appear. Registered extension numbers and names are displayed on the left. Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next.
• Page 414
  3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
• Page 415
  3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 416
  3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT. Value Range Headset OFF, Headset ON Maintenance Console Location 3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 417
  3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

• Page 418: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property

  3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property 3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified. To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command. The properties of the built-in 2-channel SVM (Simplified Voice Message) feature can also be specified on this screen.

• Page 419
  EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Installation Manual References For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References None…
• Page 420
  3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Value Range INS: The card is in service. OUS: The card is out of service. Fault: The card has been removed from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX. Pre-Install: There is no card in the sub-slot, but the card type is programmed for the sub-slot. Idle: There is no card in the sub-slot, no programming of the card type for the sub-slot.

• Page 421: Device Type

  3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Device Type Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only). Value Range Relay, Ringer Maintenance Console Location 3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 External Relay Control…

• Page 422
  3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–255) s Maintenance Console Location 3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.7 External Sensor SVM Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature. It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
• Page 423
  3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.24.1 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 424: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property-Card Command

  3.56 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command 3.56 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed. Puts the card in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.56 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 425
  EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.56 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Installation Manual References For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References None…

• Page 426: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Option Card Setup

  ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.57 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup Installation Manual References For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property…

• Page 427
  3.57 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.55 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References None Card Inserted Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card Value Range MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card…

• Page 428: 1-2] Portable Station

  3.58 [1-2] Portable Station 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 128 (with the KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200) or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PSs can be registered. Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.

• Page 429
  4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station Installation Manual References For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 3.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX 3.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX 3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX For KX-TDE600: 3.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX…
• Page 430
  3.58 [1-2] Portable Station Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Extension No. Specifies the extension number of the PS.
• Page 431
  3.58 [1-2] Portable Station Maintenance Console Location 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only). Value Range None, Registered Maintenance Console Location 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station…

• Page 432: 1-3] Option

  3.59 [1-3] Option 3.59 [1-3] Option System options can be programmed. It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the procedure below in batch mode: Click Clear Master CS. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No. If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode.

• Page 433
  3.59 [1-3] Option New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.59 [1-3] Option Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is…

• Page 434: 1-4] Clock Priority

  3.60 [1-4] Clock Priority 3.60 [1-4] Clock Priority Slot Number (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), Shelf-Slot Number (KX-TDE600) Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI, PRI, T1, and E1 cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX.

• Page 435: [2] System

  Section 4 [2] System PC Programming Manual…

• Page 436: 2-1-1] Date & Time-Date & Time Setting

  4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting 4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS). This option is only available in Interactive mode.

• Page 437: 2-1-2] Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving

  4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).

• Page 438
  4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Maintenance Console Location 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.5 Automatic Setup SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone Specifies your local UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone using the up and down arrows. Value Range -14:00–+14:00 Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 439: 2-1-2] Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving-Daylight Saving

  4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.

• Page 440
  4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2099 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Programming Manual References 4.2 [2-1-2] Date &…

• Page 441: 2-2] Operator & Bgm

  4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).

• Page 442: Bgm And Music On Hold—Sound On Transfer

  4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Value Range Tone, BGM 1 (External BGM Port 1), BGM 2 (Internal 1/2 or External 2) Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.13.4 Music on Hold BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music on Hold, or ringback tone).

• Page 443: 2-3] Timers & Counters

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 444: Automatic Redial—Analogue Co Mute / Busy Detection Timer

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.

• Page 445: Dial—Extension Inter-Digit

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Dial—Extension First Digit Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination must be dialled before a reorder tone is heard. Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &…

• Page 446
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.

• Page 447: Recall—Transfer Recall

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode. Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night is set to «0».

• Page 448
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Recall—Call Park Recall Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.

• Page 449: Tone Length—Busy Tone / Dnd Tone

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.) Value Range 0 (continuous)–15 s…

• Page 450
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release 1.11.1 Hands-free Operation DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf DISA—Delayed Answer Timer Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM. Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 451
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number) Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service activates.
• Page 452
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing…
• Page 453
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller prolongs the call. (Selecting «0» prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.) Value Range 0–7 min Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 454: Doorphone—Call Ring Duration

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Doorphone—Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there is no answer. Value Range 10 ´…

• Page 455
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &…
• Page 456
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings. Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–30) s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.
• Page 457
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.14.1.2 Conference Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference. Value Range 0–240 s Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 458
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
• Page 459
  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.7 External Sensor Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.

• Page 460: Pt Display—Pt Last Display Duration In Idle Mode

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status. Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &…

• Page 461: System Wireless—Ps Out Of Range Timer

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS during a conversation. Value Range 64 + 16 ´…

• Page 462: Svm—Recording Time

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 0 s, 4 s, 8 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 4.18 [2-9] System Options— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Feature Guide References 1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group SVM—Recording Time Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.

• Page 463: Broadcasting—Ring Duration

  4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Broadcasting—Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a broadcasting call will ring. The broadcasting call will be established with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires, the call is cancelled.

• Page 464: 2-4] Week Table

  4.6 [2-4] Week Table 4.6 [2-4] Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.

• Page 465: 2-4] Week Table-Time Setting

  4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods. 1.

• Page 466
  4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2.
• Page 467
  4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual…

• Page 468: 2-5] Holiday Table

  4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. Holiday Table—Setting Enables the setting of the holiday.

• Page 469
  4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 470: 2-6-1] Numbering Plan-Main

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, numbers to access other PBXs in a network, and KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling numbers can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see «2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering» in the Feature Guide.

• Page 471
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Features Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone. Operator Call Specifies the feature number used to call the operator. Value Range Max.

• Page 472: Trunk Group Access

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings…

• Page 473: Doorphone Call

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References…

• Page 474: Group Paging

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Group Paging Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References…

• Page 475: Single Co Line Access

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main OGM Record / Clear / Playback Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain OGM. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message…

• Page 476: Directed Call Pickup

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References…

• Page 477: Group Paging Answer

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Feature Guide References 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.

• Page 478: Account Code Entry

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA. Value Range Max.

• Page 479
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension. Value Range Max.

• Page 480: Door Open

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Call Park / Call Park Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References…

• Page 481
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open External Relay Access Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.6 [5-4] External Relay…
• Page 482
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN COLR Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called party’s number to the caller.
• Page 483
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

• Page 484: Isdn-Fwd (Msn) Set / Cancel / Confirm

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting. Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.

• Page 485
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls. Value Range Max.

• Page 486: Fwd No Answer Timer Set

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main FWD No Answer Timer Set Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND…

• Page 487
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.

• Page 488: Walking Extension

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Paging Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging your extension). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group…

• Page 489: Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.5 Data Line Security Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an extension.

• Page 490
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override…

• Page 491: Incoming Call Queue Monitor

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Incoming Call Queue Monitor Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display. Value Range Max.

• Page 492: Bgm Set / Cancel

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message BGM Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while on-hook.

• Page 493: Printing Message

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Timed Reminder Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder…

• Page 494
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually. Value Range Max.

• Page 495: Extension Feature Clear

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock Extension Feature Clear Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.

• Page 496
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) Dial Information (CTI) Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References…

• Page 497: Busy Out Cancel

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk. Value Range Max.

• Page 498: Other Pbx Extension

  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Other PBX Extension Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in this table.

• Page 499
  4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling Message Key—Phone Number Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE button on the KX-T7710 is pressed. By default, this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication, Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.

• Page 500: 2-6-2] Numbering Plan-Quick Dial

  4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to «Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks»…

• Page 501
  4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Feature Guide References 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Phone Number Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used. Value Range Max.

• Page 502: 2-6-3] Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature

  4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see «2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering»…

• Page 503: Call Monitor

  4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice. Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References…

• Page 504: Automatic Callback Busy

  4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Monitor 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 1.8.3 Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes…

• Page 505
  4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA PC Programming Manual…

• Page 506: 2-7-1] Class Of Service-Cos Settings

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.

• Page 507
  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Value Range 1: Allows all trunk calls 2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls…

• Page 508: Co & Smdr

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) CO & SMDR COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

• Page 509: Account Code Mode

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Call Forward to CO Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 510: Cf (Msn)

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry CF (MSN) Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX, on an MSN basis. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 511: Dnd Override

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Executive Busy Override Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

• Page 512: Ohca / Whisper Ohca

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) OHCA / Whisper OHCA Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 513: Executive Busy Override Deny

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Call Pickup by DSS Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—…

• Page 514: Programming Mode Level

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.

• Page 515
  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.3.2 PT Programming Manager Specifies the authorisation to use manager features. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—…
• Page 516
  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) SDN Key Mode Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.

• Page 517: Door Unlock

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN— COS Name Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension SDN Key Assignment by PT Program Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 518
  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open External Relay Access Enables access to external relays.

• Page 519: Remote Operation By Other Extension

  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Remote Operation by Other Extension Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using DISA).

• Page 520
  4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Broadcasting Operation Enables making broadcasting calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers &…

• Page 521: 2-7-2] Class Of Service-External Call Block

  Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1–96 (KX-TDE600) Specifies the available trunk groups.

• Page 522: 2-7-3] Class Of Service-Internal Call Block

  4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.

• Page 523: 2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Co

  4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

• Page 524: 2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone

  4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

• Page 525: 2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others

  4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

• Page 526
  4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Value Range Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None…
• Page 527
  4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual…

• Page 528: 2-9] System Options

  4.18 [2-9] System Options 4.18 [2-9] System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None…

• Page 529: Pt Fwd / Dnd—Fwd Led

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing…

• Page 530: Pt Fwd / Dnd—Paging To Dnd Extension

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.20.3 LED Indication PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.) Value Range FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.

• Page 531
  4.18 [2-9] System Options PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T75xx/T76xx Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7400, KX-T7500, KX-T7600, or KX-DT300 series telephones and IP-PTs. Value Range Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through the hands-free speaker.
• Page 532
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options…
• Page 533
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Disable (Disconnect), Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.13.1 Call Hold PT Operation—Hold Key Mode Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature.
• Page 534
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear—Fwd/DND Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Value Range Clear, Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 535
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CODEC—Network CODEC Selects the CODEC type for ISDN or T1/E1 lines. Value Range A-Law, µ-Law Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 536: Redial—Automatic Redial When No Answer (Isdn)

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers &…

• Page 537: Redial—Call Log By Redial Key

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial Redial—Call Log by Redial key Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a DPT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options…

• Page 538: Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called By Voice

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in voice-calling mode. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References…

• Page 539
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.
• Page 540
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension when a party leaves a conference call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None…

• Page 541: Dial Tone—Dial Tone For Ars

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.29.1 Dial Tone Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them. Value Range Type A, Type B Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References…

• Page 542
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Echo Cancel—Conference Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for conference calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.14.1.2 Conference Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for trunk-to-trunk calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 543: Dss Key—Dss Key Mode For Incoming Call

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References None Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls. If set to «Enable», the echo canceller card is used for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls. If set to «Disable», the echo canceller card is not used for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 544: Dss Key—Call Pick-Up By Dss Key For Icd Group Call

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call. Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call. Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References…

• Page 545: Transfer—Transfer To Busy Extension Without Bss Operation

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy. Value Range Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature, it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.) Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in Recall—Transfer Recall in 4.5 [2-3]…

• Page 546
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held Party) Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to «Enable», the transfer destination will receive the original caller’s CLIP information, not the information of the extension that performed the transfer.

• Page 547: System Wireless—Out Of Range Registration

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional SD Card Required) Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network (not including a VoIP network) to have the same leading number.

• Page 548
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS (i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.

• Page 549: Whisper Ohca—For Slt / Apt / Kx-T72Xx

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.1 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs, and DPTs other than KX-T7400 series, KX-T7500 series, KX-T7600 series, or KX-DT300 series.

• Page 550: Busy Out—Busy Out For Analogue Co

  4.18 [2-9] System Options Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected, preventing that trunk from being used. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None…

• Page 551
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received. Value Range Mode1: Disable Mode2: Enable…
• Page 552
  4.18 [2-9] System Options 1st Party CTI—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
• Page 553
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
• Page 554
  4.18 [2-9] System Options 3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released automatically. Value Range 0–10 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 555
  4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Make Call—SLT Ring Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None…

• Page 556: 2-10] Extension Cid Settings

  4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore) Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings…

• Page 557: Caller Id Signal Type

  4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Channel Seizure Wait Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

• Page 558
  4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 559
  4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the trunk) when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

• Page 560: 2-11-1] Audio Gain-Paging/Moh

  4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. Value Range -15–15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group…

• Page 561: Moh—Moh 1 (Music On Hold)

  4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Maintenance Console Location 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1. Value Range -11–11 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH…

• Page 562: 2-11-2] Audio Gain-Card

  4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card 4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -15–15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Programming Manual References…

• Page 563: [3] Group

  Section 5 [3] Group PC Programming Manual…

• Page 564: 3-1-1] Trunk Group-Trg Settings

  5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the trunks within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) trunk groups can be programmed.

• Page 565: Line Hunting Order

  5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Line Hunting Order Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks. Value Range High ->…

• Page 566
  5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 4.18 [2-9] System Options 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Caller ID Modification Table Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number). Value Range 1–4 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 567
  5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Tone Detection Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None DISA Tone Detection—Silence…

• Page 568: Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence

  5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 569: Host Pbx Access Code

  5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 570
  5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Guide References None Host PBX Access Code 1–10 Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings…
• Page 571
  5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in Brazil.

• Page 572: 3-1-2] Trunk Group-Local Access Priority

  Trunk Group No. & Name Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level. Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Trunk Group No. 1–64 For KX-TDE600: Trunk Group No. 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority…

• Page 573: 3-1-3] Caller Id Modification

  5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.

• Page 574
  5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References…
• Page 575
  5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
• Page 576
  5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port— Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port— Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID…
• Page 577
  5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port—…

• Page 578: 3-1-4] Dialling Plan

  5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.

• Page 579
  5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the number dialled by en-bloc dialling in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan Programming Manual References None…

• Page 580: 3-1-4] Dialling Plan-Auto Assign

  5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign 5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 «X»s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.

• Page 581: 3-1-5] Trunk Group-Charge Rate

  5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate 5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.

• Page 582: 3-2] User Group

  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— User Group Feature Guide References 2.2.2 Group Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 5.7 [3-2] User Group Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings…

• Page 583: 3-3] Call Pickup Group

  Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) call pickup groups can be programmed.

• Page 584
  5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual…

• Page 585: 3-3] Call Pickup Group-All Setting

  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group User Group 1–32 (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1–96 (KX-TDE600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF Maintenance Console Location 5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting…

• Page 586: 3-4] Paging Group

  Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) paging groups can be programmed.

• Page 587
  5.10 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual…

• Page 588: 3-4] Paging Group-All Setting

  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group User Group 1–32 (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1–96 (KX-TDE600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF (white) Maintenance Console Location 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting…

• Page 589: 3-4] Paging Group-External

  5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Value Range Max.

• Page 590
  5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual…

• Page 591: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings

  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call distribution groups can be programmed.

• Page 592
  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Distribution Method Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 593
  Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings…

• Page 594: Overflow Queuing Busy

  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.

• Page 595
  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References…

• Page 596: Overflow No Answer

  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue. Value Range None, 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Overflow No Answer…

• Page 597
  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual Queue Redirection in each time mode.

• Page 598: Queuing Time Table

  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Hurry-up Level Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the Hurry-up button. Value Range None, 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button…

• Page 599
  Feature Guide References None Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, Table 1–Table 64 For KX-TDE600: None, Table 1–Table 128 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table…

• Page 600: Extension No Answer Redirection Time

  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Miscellaneous Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 601: Maximum No. Of Busy Extension

  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group.

• Page 602
  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Last Extension Log-out Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 603
  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration. Value Range Max.
• Page 604
  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call…
• Page 605
  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max.
• Page 606
  5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 607: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List

  5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the KX-TDE600) members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings.

• Page 608: Delayed Ring

  5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.) Value Range Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Programming Manual References…

• Page 609: 3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table

  Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the KX-TDE600) Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

• Page 610: 3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous

  5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.

• Page 611
  5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Value Range Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD) Maintenance Console Location 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Options—Wrap-up Timer based on Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used. If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List becomes unavailable.

• Page 612: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group

  (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the KX-TDE600) hunting groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.

• Page 613
  5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References…

• Page 614: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group-Member List

  5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List 5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.

• Page 615: 3-7-1] Vm(Dpt) Group-System Settings

  5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.

• Page 616
  5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Transfer Recall to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed time period;…

• Page 617: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings

  5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

• Page 618: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List

  5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port.

• Page 619
  5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1, 2 For KX-TDE600: 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.2.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group VM Port No.
• Page 620
  5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.2.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max.

• Page 621: 3-8-1] Vm(Dtmf) Group-System Settings

  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 8 (with the KX-TDE600) VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.

• Page 622
  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode. Value Range Max.
• Page 623
  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 624
  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.
• Page 625
  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Command—Listening Message Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without having to dial the mailbox number manually.
• Page 626
  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM Service Mode. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 627
  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has answered a call.
• Page 628
  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode.
• Page 629
  5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others—Mailbox for Extension Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group. Value Range Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 630: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings

  5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

• Page 631
  5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual…

• Page 632: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List

  5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List 5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Member List Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

• Page 633: 3-9] Ps Ring Group

  A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PS extensions.

• Page 634
  5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group Value Range Caller ID, Called Number Maintenance Console Location 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.25.2 PS Ring Group PC Programming Manual…

• Page 635: 3-9] Ps Ring Group-Member List

  5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List 5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list.

• Page 636: 3-10] Broadcasting Group

  5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group 5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group A broadcasting group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a broadcasting call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple broadcasting groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 broadcasting groups.

• Page 637: 3-10] Broadcasting Group-Member List

  5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List 5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each broadcasting group. Select the group to programme from the Broadcasting Group Number list. To copy the numbers to another group, click Member list copy, select the group to copy to, and click OK. Dial Number Specifies the destination number of each member of the broadcasting group.

• Page 638
  5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List PC Programming Manual…

• Page 639: [4] Extension

  Section 6 [4] Extension PC Programming Manual…

• Page 640: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings

  Extension User Group Table. See 5.7 [3-2] User Group for more details. Main Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings…

• Page 641
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension.
• Page 642
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Indicates the extension port type (reference only). Value Range DPT: DPT port (DLC) SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/CSLC) S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
• Page 643
  None User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–32 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings…
• Page 644
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) Intercept Destination Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual PC Programming Manual…
• Page 645
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 646
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply. Set the status of the extension port to «OUS», then «INS». When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use.
• Page 647
  Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings PC Programming Manual…
• Page 648
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port…
• Page 649
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect. Value Range Max.
• Page 650
  Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 651
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension.
• Page 652
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a trunk call.
• Page 653
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 654
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
• Page 655
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.

• Page 656: Wireless Xdp

  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Wireless XDP Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To enable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting. When changing the port type of an extension port in DPT Type—Type on the 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port screen, the…

• Page 657
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.
• Page 658
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 2 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 659
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
• Page 660
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker W-OHCA: Voice from the handset Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings…
• Page 661
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Guide References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Pickup Dial No.
• Page 662
  Feature Guide References 1.11.5 Data Line Security Option 3 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 663
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
• Page 664
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings…
• Page 665
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
• Page 666
  None Feature Guide References 1.5.3 Intercom Call Option 4 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 667
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension.
• Page 668
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Outgoing Preferred Line Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call. Value Range No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
• Page 669
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension. Value Range CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2 Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 670
  1.11.1 Hands-free Operation 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Option 5 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 671
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References…
• Page 672
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Display Language Selects the display language of the extension telephone.
• Page 673
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings…
• Page 674
  None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback Option 6 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 675
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number…
• Page 676
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Forced Automatic Answer Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.

• Page 677: Display Lock / Svm Lock

  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension. Value Range KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/ KX-NT321): 1–30…

• Page 678: Paging Deny

  None Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging Option 7 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None…

• Page 679
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References…
• Page 680
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
• Page 681
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 682
  Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Option 8 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 683
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References…

• Page 684: Extension Caller Id Sending

  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call) Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.

• Page 685: Slt Mw Mode

  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after the previous unanswered call.

• Page 686
  Options—Wrap-up Timer based on Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Option 9 Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 687
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References…
• Page 688
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 689
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 690
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
• Page 691
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings FWD Set for Call from CO Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) DND Set for Call from CO…
• Page 692
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 693
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 694
  6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 695: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

  6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings— CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.

• Page 696
  6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Value Range 0–5 Maintenance Console Location 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max.
• Page 697
  6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 698: 4-1-2] Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd

  6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Call from CO—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.

• Page 699
  6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from CO—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References…
• Page 700
  6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Call from Extension—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button. Value Range OFF, FWD, DND Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
• Page 701
  6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from Extension—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References…
• Page 702
  6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Maintenance Console Location 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 703: 4-1-3] Wired Extension-Speed Dial

  6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension.

• Page 704: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button

  6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy Feature Guide References None Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References…

• Page 705
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References…
• Page 706
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 707
  1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service — Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button…
• Page 708
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed. Value Range Max.
• Page 709
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max.
• Page 710
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log) Specifies the extension’s own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed.
• Page 711
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References…
• Page 712
  1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles.
• Page 713
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service.
• Page 714
  1.31.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button…
• Page 715
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/ KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.) Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References…
• Page 716
  6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration PC Programming Manual…

• Page 717: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

  6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy 6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.

• Page 718: 4-1-5] Wired Extension-Pf Button

  6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button 6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

• Page 719: 4-1-6] Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data — Send

  6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data — Send 6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data — Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX — Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

• Page 720: 4-1-7] Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message

  6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each extension. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.

• Page 721
  6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number Indicates the extension number (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References…
• Page 722
  6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References None Simplified Voice Message Selects which card (IPCMPR or ESVM) to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension. Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block.

• Page 723: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings

  For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PSs can be programmed. To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 5.7 [3-2] User Group for more details.

• Page 724
  None User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–32 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings…
• Page 725
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS. CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
• Page 726
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night…
• Page 727
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
• Page 728
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode. When this setting is set to «0», the system timer is used. Value Range 0–240 s Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 729
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a trunk call.
• Page 730
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 731
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station—…
• Page 732
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the PS’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 733
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Feature Guide References 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Option 2 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 734
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.3.3 Call Waiting Automatic C. Waiting Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call via an incoming call distribution group.
• Page 735
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Pickup Dial No. Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 736
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 737
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Absent Message Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for each PS. Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message…
• Page 738
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station—…
• Page 739
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing Incoming Preferred Line Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook. Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.
• Page 740
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Option 5 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max.
• Page 741
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Display Language Selects the display language of the PS. Value Range Language1–Language5 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS’s display.
• Page 742
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Option 6 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station—…

• Page 743: Svm Lock

  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range No Limitation, One-touch Dial Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling SVM Lock Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other extensions.

• Page 744
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.
• Page 745
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS’s Incoming Call Log memory. Value Range 0–100 Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 746
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS. Value Range Automatic, Speech, Audio Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 747
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call) Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.
• Page 748
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 9 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
• Page 749
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension FWD / DND Reference Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND.
• Page 750
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings FWD Set for Call from CO Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) DND Set for Call from CO…
• Page 751
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 752
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 753
  6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 754: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

  6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.

• Page 755
  6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Value Range 0–4 Maintenance Console Location 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max.
• Page 756
  6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 757: 4-2-2] Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd

  6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. Call from CO—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.

• Page 758
  6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from CO—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References…
• Page 759
  6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Call from Extension—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button. Value Range OFF, FWD, DND Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.
• Page 760
  6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from Extension—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References…
• Page 761
  6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Maintenance Console Location 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 762: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button

  6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy Feature Guide References None Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References…

• Page 763
  6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access…
• Page 764
  6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Selects which time modes are switched manually. Value Range All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References…
• Page 765
  6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Parameter Selection (for Time Service — Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button…
• Page 766
  6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed. Value Range Max.
• Page 767
  6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References…
• Page 768
  6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from. Value Range Max.
• Page 769
  6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
• Page 770
  1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs. Value Range Max.
• Page 771
  1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button…
• Page 772
  6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

• Page 773: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

  6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy 6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.

• Page 774: 4-2-4] Portable Station-Ndss Link Data — Send

  6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data — Send 6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data — Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX — Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

• Page 775: 4-2-5] Portable Station-Simplified Voice Message

  6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.

• Page 776
  6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block. If two cards are used in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.

• Page 777: 4-3] Dss Console

  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 64 (with the KX-TDE600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port.

• Page 778
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Guide References 1.20.2 Flexible Buttons Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 1–128 For KX-TDE600 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access…
• Page 779
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.13.2 Call Park…
• Page 780
  1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service — Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console…
• Page 781
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None…
• Page 782
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own messages only. Value Range Max.
• Page 783
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded.
• Page 784
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None…
• Page 785
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
• Page 786
  1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles. Value Range Max.
• Page 787
  1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console…
• Page 788
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) Specifies the ring tone type. Value Range KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/ KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.) Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console…
• Page 789
  6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration PC Programming Manual…

• Page 790: 4-3] Dss Console-Dss Key Data Copy

  6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy The flexible DSS button settings of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./ Pair Extension list, then click Copy To.

• Page 791: [5] Optional Device

  Section 7 [5] Optional Device PC Programming Manual…

• Page 792: 5-1] Doorphone

  7.1 [5-1] Doorphone 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf to which the doorphone is connected (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 793
  7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Name Specifies the doorphone name. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode.
• Page 794
  7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call…
• Page 795
  7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call 1.24.2.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration PC Programming Manual…

• Page 796: 5-2] External

  7.2 [5-2] External Pager 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.5.8 Tool— Extension List View). Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.

• Page 797: 5-3-1] Voice Message-Disa System

  7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see «1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)» in the Feature Guide. Option 1 DISA Security—DISA Security Mode Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorised access to the PBX.

• Page 798
  7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Feature Guide References None DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting. Value Range Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message Maintenance Console Location 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References…
• Page 799
  7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, » CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO»…
• Page 800
  7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network Feature Guide References None CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls to be established using DISA. Value Range Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA.
• Page 801
  7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF «#» (Optional SD Card Required) Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension within the PBX by dialling «#» + extension number. Value Range Disable: «#»…
• Page 802
  7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Value Range Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to 4 times in the ranges of: = 100–1300 ms, 90 ms, 90 ms Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option on this screen.
• Page 803
  7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-off.
• Page 804
  7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Value Range None, 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder Recording Mode Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the ESVM card when using it as an MSG card. Increasing the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available on the card.

• Page 805: 5-3-2] Voice Message-Disa Message

  7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.5.8 Tool— Extension List View).

• Page 806
  7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Busy / DND Message No.

• Page 807: 5-3-3] Voice Message-Svm

  7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Settings related to Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed via the IPCMPR card or ESVM card. SVM Card No.1, 2—Slot Number Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 808: Remote Access

  7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Maintenance Console Location 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Recording Mode Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded by the SVM feature. Increasing the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available with this feature.

• Page 809
  7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM Cyclic Tone Detection Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call when an extension user records a greeting message or callers leave voice messages in a message box. To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting.
• Page 810
  7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before recognising it as a tone-off.
• Page 811
  7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 812: 5-4] External Relay

  7.6 [5-4] External Relay 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Settings related to external relays can be programmed. External Relay No. Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay…

• Page 813
  7.6 [5-4] External Relay Value Range Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 External Relay Control Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References…
• Page 814
  7.6 [5-4] External Relay Feature Guide References 1.17.8 External Relay Control Relay Activate Time Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated. Value Range 1–7 s Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 External Relay Control…

• Page 815: 5-5] External Sensor

  To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). External Sensor No. Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor…

• Page 816
  7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Value Range Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.7 External Sensor Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References None…
• Page 817
  1.17.7 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor…
• Page 818
  7.7 [5-5] External Sensor PC Programming Manual…

• Page 819: [6] Feature

  Section 8 [6] Feature PC Programming Manual…

• Page 820: 6-1] System Speed Dial

  Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed Dialling Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8.6 [6-6] Tenant. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Basic Memory: the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1–8: additional tables For KX-TDE600: Basic Memory: the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1–32: additional tables…

• Page 821: Co Line Access Number + Telephone Number

  8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 1.18.1 Caller ID CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max.

• Page 822: 6-2] Hotel & Charge

  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range 100–699 Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel &…

• Page 823
  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.28.4 Timed Reminder SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension. The «%»…

• Page 824: Checkout Billing—Lcd For «Telephone

  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for «Telephone» Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges. Value Range Max.

• Page 825
  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for «Telephone» Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max.
• Page 826
  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for «Others» Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max. 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR)

• Page 827: Margin & Tax—Margin Rate For «Telephone

  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Footer 1–3 Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the guest bill. Value Range Max. 80 characters Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…

• Page 828: Margin & Tax—Tax Rate For «Minibar

  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for «Minibar» (%) Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 829: Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point

  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use. Value Range 0–6 Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—…

• Page 830: Charge Options—Action At Charge Limit

  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Value Range Head, Tail Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Budget Management Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services…

• Page 831
  8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services PC Programming Manual…

• Page 832: 6-3] Verification Code

  8.3 [6-3] Verification Code 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.

• Page 833: Itemised Billing Code For Ars

  8.3 [6-3] Verification Code The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. Changing PINs frequently.

• Page 834: Budget Management

  8.3 [6-3] Verification Code Programming Manual References 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Budget Management Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—…

• Page 835: 6-4] Second Dial Tone

  8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone 8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.

• Page 836: 6-5] Absent Message

  8.5 [6-5] Absent Message 8.5 [6-5] Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.

• Page 837: 6-6] Tenant

  8.6 [6-6] Tenant 8.6 [6-6] Tenant A maximum of 8 (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/32 (KX-TDE600) tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

• Page 838: Ars Mode

  8.6 [6-6] Tenant ARS Mode Specifies the ARS mode used when making a trunk call. Value Range Off: ARS is disabled. On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method.

• Page 839: [7] Trs

  Section 9 [7] TRS PC Programming Manual…

• Page 840: 7-1] Denied Code

  9.1 [7-1] Denied Code 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).

• Page 841: 7-2] Exception Code

  9.2 [7-2] Exception Code 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).

• Page 842: 7-3] Special Carrier

  If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will look only at the following digits. A maximum of 20 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 100 (with the KX-TDE600) Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed. With the KX-TDE600, 20 codes are displayed at a time. To show other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

• Page 843: 7-4] Emergency Dial

  9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial 9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code— Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded. A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.

• Page 844: 7-5] Miscellaneous

  9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.

• Page 845
  9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Keep: The TRS/Barring check is performed when the timer expires. Maintenance Console Location 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call.
• Page 846
  9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6) Selects the method of TRS/Barring to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS/Barring is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.

• Page 847: 10 [8] Ars

  Section 10 [8] ARS PC Programming Manual…

• Page 848: 8-1] System Setting

  10.1 [8-1] System Setting 10.1 [8-1] System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.

• Page 849: 8-2] Leading Number

  10.2 [8-2] Leading Number 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.

• Page 850
  10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Routing Plan Number Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

• Page 851: 8-3] Routing Plan Time

  The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 16 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 48 (with the KX-TDE600) Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.

• Page 852: 8-3] Routing Plan Time-Time Setting

  10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

• Page 853: 8-4] Routing Plan Priority

  Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab. Time-A–Time-D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, 1–10 For KX-TDE600: None, 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority…

• Page 854: 8-5] Carrier

  It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 10 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 48 (with the KX-TDE600) different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.

• Page 855
  None Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDE600) Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier. TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDE600) Enables each trunk group for each carrier. If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk group is enabled for use with that carrier.
• Page 856
  Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant. Note For the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200, only up to 8 tenants are available. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6 [8-5] Carrier…

• Page 857: 8-6] Leading Number Exception

  10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 10.1 [8-1] System Setting is «on».

• Page 858: 8-7] Authorisation Code For Trg

  10.6 [8-5] Carrier. 8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab. Authorisation Code for Trunk Group—TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDE600) Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group.

• Page 859: 11 [9] Private Network

  Section 11 [9] Private Network PC Programming Manual…

• Page 860: 9-1] Tie Table

  11.1 [9-1] TIE Table 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.

• Page 861: Trunk Group

  11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None…

• Page 862
  11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, 1–64 For KX-TDE600: None, 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Centralised VM Leading Number Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line network.
• Page 863
  11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail PC Programming Manual…

• Page 864: 9-2] Network Data Transmission

  11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.

• Page 865
  11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.
• Page 866
  11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Value Range 100 ´ n (n=0–30) ms Maintenance Console Location 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before being cancelled.
• Page 867
  11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required) Feature Guide References 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail PC Programming Manual…

• Page 868: 9-3] Network Operator (Voip)

  Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDE600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data. Value Range For IP-GW Card Undefined, 1–11 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), 1-1–4-11 (with the KX-TDE600) For V-IPGW Card Undefined, V-1–V-4 Maintenance Console Location 11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)

• Page 869
  11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual…

• Page 870: 9-4] Ndss Key Table

  11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.

• Page 871
  11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX that the extension is connected to (reference only). Value Range None, 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References…
• Page 872
  11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table PC Programming Manual…

• Page 873: 10] Co & Incoming Call

  Section 12 [10] CO & Incoming Call PC Programming Manual…

• Page 874: 10-1] Co Line Settings

  12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) trunk groups. For KX-TDE600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list. Select the shelf and slot and card type to programme, or select «All»…

• Page 875: Co Name

  12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the type of card to which the trunk is connected (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 876: Trunk Group Number

  12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Trunk Group Number Specifies the trunk group number to which the trunk belongs. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings…

• Page 877: 10-2] Dil Table & Port Settings

  To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings…

• Page 878
  12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type…
• Page 879
  12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls.
• Page 880
  1.30.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings…
• Page 881
  System Speed Dialling Table. CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis. Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &…
• Page 882
  12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &…

• Page 883: Cli Ring For Dil—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

  12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

• Page 884
  12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References…
• Page 885
  12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY…
• Page 886
  12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &…
• Page 887
  12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 1.30.1 TIE Line Service PC Programming Manual…

• Page 888: 10-3] Ddi / Did Table

  12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.

• Page 889
  1.30.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table…

• Page 890: Cli Ring For Ddi/Did—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

  12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table VM Trunk Group No. Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DID destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 891: 10-3] Ddi/Did Table-Automatic Registration

  12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration 12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed. Value Range 1–1000 Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 892
  12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Maintenance Console Location 12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all check box.

• Page 893: 10-3] Ddi/Did Table-Name Generate

  12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate 12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

• Page 894
  12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Maintenance Console Location 12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name. Value Range Max.

• Page 895: 10-4] Msn Table

  12.6 [10-4] MSN Table 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night). A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port. To use this feature, Access Mode in 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port must be set to P-MP.

• Page 896
  12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MSN Number Specifies the MSN.
• Page 897
  1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table…
• Page 898
  12.6 [10-4] MSN Table The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service CLI for MSN…

• Page 899: Cli Ring For Msn—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

  12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References…

• Page 900: 10-5] Miscellaneous

  12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing — DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.

• Page 901
  12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination PC Programming Manual…
• Page 902
  12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual…

• Page 903: 11] Maintenance

  Section 13 [11] Maintenance PC Programming Manual…

• Page 904: 11-1] Main

  13.1 [11-1] Main 13.1 [11-1] Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main…

• Page 905
  13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range 4–99 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length.
• Page 906
  13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H) Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format. Value Range 12H, 24H Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
• Page 907
  13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Intercom Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References…
• Page 908
  13.1 [11-1] Main Print Information—Hotel Room Status Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.27.2 Room Status Control Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.
• Page 909
  13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information SMDR Options Option—ARS Dial Selects the type of the dialled number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature. Value Range Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialled number Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number…
• Page 910
  13.1 [11-1] Main Option—DDI/DID Number & Name Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number. Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Secret Dial Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial.
• Page 911
  13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing Call Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Condition Code «RC» Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 912
  13.1 [11-1] Main Option—Caller ID Modification Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX) or after being modified. Value Range Before Modification, After Modification Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
• Page 913
  13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) LAN—New Line Code for Telnet Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator. If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return). If not, select CR+LF (Line Feed).
• Page 914
  13.1 [11-1] Main Communication—NL Code Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer. If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return). If not, select CR+LF (Line Feed). Value Range CR+LF, CR Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 915
  13.1 [11-1] Main • Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 2 bit Value Range 7 bit, 8 bit Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Communication—Flow Enables the hardware flow control.
• Page 916
  13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) External Modem Command—Automatic Initialisation Specifies the command to automatically initialise an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX. Value Range Max.
• Page 917
  13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Set Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 918
  13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time. Value Range 0–59 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter) Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after…
• Page 919
  13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required) Feature Guide References 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Syslog Syslog Enables the PBX to output local alarm information to a syslog server. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 920: Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number

  13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management Syslog—Major Selects whether to output major alarm information to a syslog server. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management Syslog—Minor Selects whether to output minor alarm information to a syslog server.

• Page 921: Remote—Isdn Remote Floating Extension Number

  13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for ISDN remote maintenance. To enable this setting, Remote— Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled. Value Range Max.

• Page 922: System Password — Pt Programming—Prog ** : User Level

  13.1 [11-1] Main Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked. Value Range None, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming Remote—Remote Maintenance Dial Number (Own Telephone number for reference)

• Page 923: System Password — Pt Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level

  13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.2 PT Programming System Password — PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level Specifies the administrator level system password to authorise the PT user to access all system programming. Value Range 4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location…

• Page 924
  13.1 [11-1] Main System Password — PC Programming—User Level Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at User Level. This password can only be set in Interactive mode. Value Range 4–10 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References…
• Page 925
  13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming PC Programming Manual…

• Page 926: 11-2] Pt Programming Access

  13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access 13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.

• Page 927: 11-3] Power Failure Transfer

  13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer 13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer When the power supply to the PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) switches the current connections to Auxiliary Connections, so that certain SLTs and trunks can be connected. Auxiliary Connections allow trunk calls to be made during a power failure.

• Page 928: 11-4-1] Snmp-System Setting

  13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.

• Page 929
  13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Maintenance Console Location 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor MIB — SysName Specifies an administrative name for the system. Value Range Max. 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Programming Manual References…

• Page 930: 11-4-2] Snmp-Manager

  13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager It is possible to assign up to two PCs as SNMP managers. The settings related to SNMP manager activity can be programmed for each SNMP manager, indicated as No.1 and No.2 on the screen. This option is only available at Installer level.

• Page 931
  13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Maintenance Console Location 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor TRAP Cold Start Selects whether the PBX sends Cold Start TRAP to an SNMP manager or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location…
• Page 932
  13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager TRAP Alarm — Major Selects whether the PBX sends Major Alarm TRAP to an SNMP manager or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor TRAP Alarm — Minor Selects whether the PBX sends Minor Alarm TRAP to an SNMP manager or not.

• Page 933: Appendix

  Section 14 Appendix PC Programming Manual…

• Page 934: Revision History

  14.1.1 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx 14.1 Revision History 14.1.1 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx New Contents • 2.2 Start Menu • 2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Network Loopback Test Changed Contents • 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console • 2.1 Introduction •…

• Page 935: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 2.01Xx

  14.1.2 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx 14.1.2 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx New Contents • 2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Changed Contents • 2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN • 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR •…

• Page 936: Feature Programming References

  14.2 Feature Programming References 14.2 Feature Programming References Absent Message • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 8.5 [6-5] Absent Message Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message Account Code Entry…

• Page 937
  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release Automatic Route Selection (ARS) • 2.5.9 Tool—Import – ARS — Leading Digit – ARS — Except Code – ARS — Routing Plan • 2.5.10 Tool—Export • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit •…
• Page 938
  14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Broadcasting Operation • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous— Broadcasting Operation • 5.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group • 5.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Broadcasting Budget Management • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit •…
• Page 939
  14.2 Feature Programming References – Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for «Others» (%) Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Call Charge Services • 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type – Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency – Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk •…

• Page 940: Call Hold

  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) • 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY •…

• Page 941: Call Park

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type Feature Guide References 1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN Call Monitor • 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Call Monitor • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Call Monitor •…

• Page 942: Call Transfer

  14.2 Feature Programming References – DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call – DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call – DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call • 5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group •…

• Page 943: Call Waiting

  14.2 Feature Programming References Call Waiting • 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — LCO type— Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features – Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call – Automatic Call Waiting • 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature –…

• Page 944
  14.2 Feature Programming References • 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8 – Extension Caller ID Sending – Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID • 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution •…
• Page 945
  14.2 Feature Programming References – COLR Set / Cancel – CLIR Set / Cancel – Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held Party) •…
• Page 946
  14.2 Feature Programming References • 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Centralised VM • 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission – Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter – Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer •…

• Page 947: Confirmation Tone

  14.2 Feature Programming References Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IPCMPR • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI) • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 6 (CTI) Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Conference • 4.5 [2-3] Timers &…

• Page 948: Dial Tone

  14.2 Feature Programming References Dial Tone • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3 – Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone – Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension – Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS Feature Guide References 1.29.1 Dial Tone Dial Tone Transfer • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button –…

• Page 949
  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection Direct In Line (DIL) • 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL – DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night – Tenant Number – VM Trunk Group No. Feature Guide References 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) •…

• Page 950: Display Information

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination— When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System • 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Display Information •…

• Page 951: Emergency Call

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Door Unlock Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open Doorphone Call • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf – Doorphone—Call Ring Duration –…

• Page 952: Extension Dial Lock

  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override Extension Dial Lock • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features – Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel – Remote Extension Dial Lock Off – Remote Extension Dial Lock On • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level on Extension Lock Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock…

• Page 953: External Sensor

  14.2 Feature Programming References External Feature Access (EFA) • 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port— Flash Time • 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port— Flash Time • 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port— Flash Time • 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — EM Port— Flash Time •…

• Page 954: Flexible Buttons

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type •…

• Page 955
  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.3.7 Floating Extension FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features – FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension – FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO – FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension –…

• Page 956: Headset Operation

  14.2 Feature Programming References – Main— Distribution Method – Main— Call Waiting Distribution – Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time – Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension • 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous – Options—Wrap-up Timer based on – Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Optional SD Card Required) •…

• Page 957: Hot Line

  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.11.4 Headset Operation Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code • 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial Feature Guide References 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Hot Line…

• Page 958: Intercept Routing

  14.2 Feature Programming References Incoming Call Log • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension Number • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings – Option 5— Incoming Call Display – Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock – Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory •…

• Page 959: Intercom Call

  14.2 Feature Programming References – Intercept No Answer Time • 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept Routing—No Destination • 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator — No Destination (Destination is not programmed.) Feature Guide References 1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination…

• Page 960: Last Number Redial

  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.1.2 Internal Call Features IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) • 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — IP Extension • 3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — IP-Extension Port Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) ISDN Extension •…

• Page 961: Led Indication

  14.2 Feature Programming References – Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration – Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Redial • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2 – Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) – Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory –…

• Page 962
  14.2 Feature Programming References • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type • 13.1 [11-1] Main – SMDR— Print Information—Error Log – Maintenance— Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2 – Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Set – Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Hour – Maintenance—…

• Page 963: Manager Features

  14.2 Feature Programming References Manager Features • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager • 13.1 [11-1] Main—Password— Manager Password — PT Programming—Prog *1 Feature Guide References 2.2.6 Manager Features Message Waiting • 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property — Extension Type— SLT Power Supply •…

• Page 964
  14.2 Feature Programming References Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) • 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — BRI Port—ISDN CO— Networking Data Transfer • 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager— Manager •…

• Page 965: Operator Features

  14.2 Feature Programming References One-touch Dialling • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Type – Dial (for One-touch) • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode •…

• Page 966
  14.2 Feature Programming References Overflow Feature • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings – Overflow Queuing Busy – Overflow No Answer • 5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table Feature Guide References 1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature Paging • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features –…

• Page 967: Pause Insertion

  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 2.3.3 Password Security Pause Insertion • 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — LCO Port— Pause Time • 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — T1 Port— Pause Time • 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — E1 Port— Pause Time •…

• Page 968: Privacy Release

  14.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Ping • 2.6.17 Utility—Ping Feature Guide References 2.4.6 Packet Internet Groper (PING) Confirmation Portable Station (PS) Connection • 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Power Failure Transfer •…

• Page 969
  14.2 Feature Programming References • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name • 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial – Name – CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Feature Guide References 1.25.3 PS Directory PS Ring Group • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Distribution Method •…

• Page 970: Ring Tone Pattern Selection

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Call Waiting on VM Group • 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Call Waiting on VM Group • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Type – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) •…

• Page 971: Software Upgrading

  14.2 Feature Programming References – Main— Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 – Bill— Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest Feature Guide References 1.27.2 Room Status Control Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only) • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Label Name Feature Guide References 1.31.4 Self Labelling (KX-NT366 only) SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension •…

• Page 972: T1 Line Service

  14.2 Feature Programming References Speed Dialling—Personal/System • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features – System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling – Personal Speed Dialling — Programming • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialling • 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial •…

• Page 973: Tenant Service

  14.2 Feature Programming References Tenant Service • 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM – PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night – BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold • 4.6 [2-4] Week Table • 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table • 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block •…

• Page 974: Time Service

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Optional SD Card Required) • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— • 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table •…

• Page 975
  14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8 • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Time Display • 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 8.2 [6-2] Hotel &…
• Page 976
  14.2 Feature Programming References – Trunk Group Access – Single CO Line Access • 4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order • 5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button –…

• Page 977: Verification Code Entry

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Extension — CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call • 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main – CO-CO Duration Time – Extension-CO Duration Time • 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Feature Guide References 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Verification Code Entry…

• Page 978
  14.2 Feature Programming References Virtual PS • 3.58 [1-2] Portable Station— Registration Feature Guide References 1.25.6 Virtual PS Voice Mail (VM) Group • 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port— DPT Type—Type • 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property — Extension Port— DPT Type—VM Unit No.

• Page 979: Voice Mail Dtmf Integration

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL – Tenant Number – VM Trunk Group No. • 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table – Tenant Number – VM Trunk Group No. • 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table—MSN –…

• Page 980: Whisper Ohca

  14.2 Feature Programming References • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN Feature Guide References 1.9.5 Walking COS Walking Extension •…

• Page 981
  Notes PC Programming Manual…
• Page 982
  Copyright: This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2007…

04:53

Установка АТС Panasonic KX-TDE 200

22:58

Программирование портов внутренних линий мини АТС Панасоник

08:58

Panasonic KX-TDA100 Software Programming

06:17

Panasonic KX NS 500 + Panasonic KX TDE 200

03:50

Panasonic KX TDE 200 Настройка, Внутренних линий и внешних городских

02:40

setting program pabx panasonic kx-tde100

12:28

KX TDE100 200 600 V8 UPGRADE

03:34

Cara Mengganti Alamat IP PABX Panasonic KX-TDE100/200